GMC Savana 2006, Savana Passenger 2006, 2006 Savana Passenger Owner's manual

GMC Savana 2006, Savana Passenger 2006, 2006 Savana Passenger Owner's manual
2006 GMC Savana Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-32
Airbag System
......................................... 1-65
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-81
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-17
Mirrors .................................................... 2-28
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-30
.............................................
3-1
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-17
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-23
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-43
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-35
M
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-43
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-44
Front Axle
............................................... 5-44
Noise Control System
............................... 5-45
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-46
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-51
Tires
...................................................... 5-52
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-84
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-92
Electrical System ...................................... 5-93
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-98
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-13
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC, the
GMC Truck Emblem, and the name SAVANA are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for GMC whenever it appears in
this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 06 SAVANA A First Printing
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
©
2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of
a component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-3
Manual Seats ................................................1-3
Power Seat ...................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-7
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-15
Driver Position ..............................................1-15
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-23
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-23
Center Passenger Position (3rd, 4th
and 5th Row) ............................................1-24
Center Passenger Position (2nd Row) ..............1-25
Rear Outside Passenger Positions ..................1-25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ....................1-28
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-31
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-31
Child Restraints .............................................1-32
Older Children ..............................................1-32
Infants and Young Children ............................1-35
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-38
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-42
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position or the Second Row Center
Seat Position ............................................1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat
Position (3rd, 4th, and 5th Row) ..................1-54
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing
System) ...................................................1-56
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch) ..........1-60
1-1
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System ...............................................1-65
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-67
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-68
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-70
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-70
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-70
Airbag Off Switch ..........................................1-71
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-74
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-79
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-80
1-2
Restraint System Check ..................................1-81
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-81
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ...1-81
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
1-3
Power Seat
If your vehicle has front power seat(s), you can adjust
them with these controls located at the front center
of the seat cushion.
To raise or lower the seat, move the center knob up or
down. To move the seat forward or rearward, move
the center knob toward the right or left.
To raise or lower the front of the seat cushion, move the
right lever up or down. To raise or lower the rear of
the seat cushion, move the left lever up or down.
1-4
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Lean forward and pull up on the front of the lever and
the seatback will go to an upright position.
To adjust the seatback, lift the front of the lever located
on the inboard side of the seat cushion.
Move the seatback to the desired position and release
the lever to lock the seatback.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
1-6
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Removing the Rear Seat
1. Disconnect the quick
release latch plates for
the lap shoulder belts
on the bench seat to be
removed. To do this,
press the tip of a key
into the release hole of
the safety belt buckle
while pulling up on the
safety belt.
• The driver’s side pin has a gray cap with a
black “L” marked on it.
2. Locate the pins. There are two pins located on the
inboard sides of the rear seats. If the vehicle has
floor mats, the pins will be located under a flap that
has been cut into the mat.
1-7
7. For the first row rear
seat, stow the safety
belt latch by attaching
the clip on the safety
belt latch to the trim just
inside the side door. For
the remaining rear
seats, stow the safety
belt latch plate on the
clip at the window trim.
• The passenger’s side pin has a black cap with a
Replacing the Rear Seats
white “R” marked on it.
3. Pull the pin handle up to disengage the pin from
the retaining clip, then pull the pin out.
{CAUTION:
4. Repeat this procedure for the pin on the other
seat base.
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
5. Pull the seat rearward about 2 inches (5 cm) and
then lift the seat from the floor rails.
6. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
1-8
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails.
Push the seat forward in the rail, hooking both
seat bases onto the pins inside of the rails.
2. To install the locking pins at the rear of the seat
base, locate the hole in the rail for the pin. It is
found on the inboard side of the seat. If the vehicle
has floor mats, pull the flap that has been cut
into the mat.
4. Push the pin with the black cap marked “R” down
until it is in the retaining clip.
3. Insert the locking pin into the seat base and push
the seat to line up with the pin with the base. The
pin with the black cap marked “R” must be installed
on the passenger’s side and the pin with the gray
cap marked “L” on the driver’s side.
1-9
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
5. Push the pin with the gray cap marked “L” down
until it is in the retaining clip.
6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, put the flap back to
its original position.
7. Repeat this procedure for the other seat base.
8. Connect the quick-release latch plates for the
lap-shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates
into the buckles attached at the outboard positions
of the bench seat. Do not twist the belt.
9. Check that all locking pins are locked into place
before operating the vehicle.
1-10
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt
Reminder Light on page 3-26 and Passenger Safety
Belt Reminder Light on page 3-26.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Put someone on it.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-13
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
Driver Position
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-35. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
We will start with the driver position.
1-15
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment on page 1-22.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-16
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
To move it down, pull on
the center adjuster control
labeled PULL. You can
move the height adjuster
up just by pushing up
on the shoulder belt guide.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it
has locked into position.
1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-15.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-23
Center Passenger Position
(3rd, 4th and 5th Row)
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has third, fourth or fifth row bench seats,
someone can sit in the center positions.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-31.
When you sit in a center seating position in the third,
fourth or fifth row, you have a lap safety belt, which has
no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
plate and pull it along the belt.
1-24
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
Center Passenger Position
(2nd Row)
If your vehicle has a second row bench seat, someone
can sit in the center position. When you sit in the
center position in the second row bench seat, you have
a lap-shoulder belt which works the same way as the
rear seat outside passengers’ belts. To learn how
to wear a lap-shoulder belt see, “Lap-Shoulder Belt”
under Rear Outside Passenger Positions on page 1-25.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
Rear Outside Passenger Positions
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who
are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
1-25
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-26
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
1-27
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear safety belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seats. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
1. Locate the guide in a pocket on the side of the
seatback.
1-28
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide
on top.
1-29
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Outside Passenger Positions
on page 1-25. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-30
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the buckle end of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-81.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
1-31
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seating
position that has a lap-shoulder belt to get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-32
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is seated in a rear outside seat position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. Also
see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on page 1-28.
If the child is sitting in the second row center seat
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the
child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts
provide. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you
might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap
belt, if your vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-33
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-34
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-36
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-37
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-38
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-39
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then
follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
1-40
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-44 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The
five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests
low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
1-41
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat unless your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system or an airbag off
switch and the passenger airbag status indicator or the
airbag off light shows off. Never put a rear facing
child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless
the airbag is off.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, there is a label on your
sun visor that says, ″Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.″ This is because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system or
the airbag off switch is designed to turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if
the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-42
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never put a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat the unless passenger airbag status
indicator shows off. Never put a rear facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the
airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag. Be
sure the airbag is off before using a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing system or
the airbag off switch is designed to turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with a
rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system or the
airbag off switch and you need to secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat,
the passenger’s frontal airbag must be off. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-74, Airbag Off
Switch on page 1-71,Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing
System) on page 1-56 or Securing a Child Restraint
in the Right Front Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch)
on page 1-60 for more on this including important
safety information.
1-43
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
1-44
When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you
must also use either the lower anchors or the safety
belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child
restraint must never be installed using only the top tether
strap and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
1-45
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
See the information following for installing a child
restraint with a top tether in the second row center
position.
Do not install three child restraints in the rear seat and
never install two top tethers using the same top
tether anchor.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Second Row
1-46
Third and Fourth Row
with Three Passenger
Bench Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
There are two top tether anchors in the second row.
To install a child restraint in the left outboard seating
position, use anchor point (A). To install a child restraint
in the right outboard seating position, use anchor
point (B). To install a child restraint in the center seating
position, use either anchor point (A) or (B). Never
install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
Front Passenger
Position
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
Second Row — Passenger Van
There is a top tether anchor for the center seating
positions in the third and fourth rows, if equipped with a
three-passenger bench seat. The anchor is located
at the bottom rear of the seat cushion.
1-47
Third or Fourth Row — Three Passenger Bench Seat
There is a top tether anchor for the front passenger
position with a front passenger seat. The anchor
is located at the rear of the seat cushion on the right
front passenger’s seat.
1-48
Front Passenger Position
There are no top tether anchors or lower anchors in a
four passenger fourth or fifth row seat.
Do not secure a child restraint in the outside seating
positions of the third and fourth rows if the vehicle has a
three-passenger bench seat, or in any four-passenger
rear bench seat, if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the top
tether in these positions.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for additional
information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-49
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. For the second row only, in the left outboard
seating position, use anchor point (A). For
the right outboard seating position, use
anchor point (B). For the center seating
position, use either anchor point (A) or (B).
Never install two top tethers using the
same top tether anchor.
2.3. Route and tighten the top tether according to
your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
1-50
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using has an integrated
headrest and you are using
a dual tether, route the
tether around the
headrest.
If the position you are
using has an integrated
headrest and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether over the headrest.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position or the
Second Row Center Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-44.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
For vehicles with a third, fourth or fifth row, there are no
top tether anchors in the rear outside seat positions
of the third, fourth or fifth row. Do not secure a child seat
in these positions if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-51
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-52
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether and the position you are using
has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and to
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-44.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
5. To tighten the belt, pull the shoulder portion of the
belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed
the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you
are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position (3rd, 4th,
and 5th Row)
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-44.
There are no top strap anchors in any four-passenger
bench seat positions (if equipped). Do not secure a child
seat in these positions if a national or local law
requires that the top strap must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap belt to secure the child
restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1-54
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether and the position you are using
has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with your child restraint and
to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-44.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-55
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With
Passenger Sensing System)
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42.
In addition, your vehicle has the passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
detected. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-74
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29
for more information on this including important
safety information.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, there is a label on your
sun visor that says, ″Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.″ This is because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-56
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never put a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat the unless passenger airbag status
indicator shows off. Never put a rear facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat unless the airbag is off.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag. Be
sure the airbag is off before using a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be transported in
vehicles with a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or Power
Seat on page 1-4.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-44.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-74. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or Power Seat
on page 1-4.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-29.
1-57
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-58
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
9. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the instrument
panel will be lit and stay lit when the key is turned
to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull
more of the belt from the retractor once the lock
has been set.
7. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether and the position you are using has
a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the top tether
to the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that
came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position
(With Airbag Off Switch)
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. There
is a switch on the instrument panel that you can
use to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on
this, including important safety information.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with a
rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the passenger seat, always move
the passenger seat as far back as it will go.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in this vehicle unless the
passenger’s airbag has been turned off.
Even though the airbag off switch is designed
to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
CAUTION:
1-60
(Continued)
United States
Canada
Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat unless the airbag is off.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Be sure the
airbag is off before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position. If you
secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the right front
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing
child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 1-42. If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing a
forward-facing child restraint. See Manual Seats on
page 1-3 or Power Seat on page 1-4.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on when you have
turned off the airbag, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system. The
right front passenger’s airbag could inflate
even though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly.
Until you have the vehicle serviced, do not let
anyone whom the national government has
identified as a member of a passenger airbag
risk group sit in the right front passenger’s
position (for example, do not secure a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat). See Airbag Off Switch on
page 1-71.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-44.
1-61
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71. If
your child restraint is forward-facing, move the seat
as far back as it will go before securing the
restraint in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3
or Power Seat on page 1-4. If you need to use a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make sure the
airbag is off once the child restraint has been
installed.
When the airbag off switch has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
in the airbag off light should light and stay lit when
you turn the ignition to RUN or START. See
Airbag Off Light on page 3-28.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-62
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder belt to tighten the lap belt portion
and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
You should not be able to pull more of the belt
out of the retractor once the lock has been set.
1-63
7. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether and the position you are using
has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and to
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-44.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
If you had turned the airbag off with the switch,
remember to be sure to use the airbag off switch to turn
on the right front passenger’s airbag when you remove
the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person
who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger
airbag risk group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71.
1-64
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned
off for a person who is not in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person will not have the extra protection of an
airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to
inflate and help protect the person sitting
there. Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71 for
more on this, including important safety
information.
Airbag System
If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel but it does not say AIR BAG on the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger’s seat,
your vehicle has an airbag for the driver only.
If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel, but there is no right front passenger seat,
your vehicle has an airbag for the driver only.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel and AIR BAG on the instrument panel in front of
the right front passenger’s seat, your vehicle has an
airbag for the driver and an airbag for the right
front passenger.
1-65
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Airbags are designed to work with safety belts,
but do not replace them. Airbags are designed
to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-66
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an airbag for the right front passenger
read this.
{CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-27
for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-32 and Infants
and Young Children on page 1-35.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-67
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s
airbag is in the instrument panel on the
passenger’s side.
1-68
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. Inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in front or near-frontal impacts.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of your
vehicle is 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) or above, your vehicle has
single stage airbags. If the GVWR is below 8,500 lb
(3 855 kg) then your vehicle has dual stage airbags.
You can find the GVWR on the certification label on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-30 for more information.
Single Stage Airbags
If your vehicle has frontal airbags with single stage
deployment and your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
is about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). (The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.)
Dual Stage Airbags
If your vehicle has frontal airbags with dual stage
deployment, the restraint will adjust according to the
crash severity. Your vehicle is equipped with electronic
frontal sensors which help the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 16 to 25 mph (26 to 40 km/h).
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
1-69
Vehicles with dual stage airbags are also equipped with
special sensors which enable the sensing system to
monitor the position of both the driver and passenger
front seats. The seat position sensors provide
information which is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
1-70
But airbags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those airbags. Airbags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbag inflated.
Some components of the airbag module — the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, or the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s airbag —will be hot for a
short time. The parts of the airbag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
system. Improper service can mean that your airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Airbag Off Switch
If your vehicle has one of the switches pictured in the
following illustrations, your vehicle has an airbag
off switch that you can use to turn off the right front
passenger’s airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
•
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 7-10.
United States
Canada
If your vehicle does not have an airbag off switch, it
may have a passenger sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-74.
1-71
This switch should only be turned to airbag OFF if the
person in the right front passenger’s position is a
member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• my vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to
12 sometimes must ride in the front because no
space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle;
or
• the child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
1-72
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his or
her physician:
• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger
airbag in a crash greater than the potential
harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard
or windshield in a crash.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned
off for a person who is not in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person will not have the extra protection of an
airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to
inflate and help protect the person sitting
there. Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
To turn off the right front passenger’s airbag, insert your
ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the off position.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s airbag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger airbag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
The airbag off light will come on to let you know that the
right front passenger’s airbag is off. The light will stay
on to remind you that the airbag is off. The right
front passenger’s airbag will remain off until you turn it
back on.
1-73
United States
Canada
If your vehicle does not have a passenger sensing
system, it may have an airbag off switch. See Airbag
Off Switch on page 1-71.
United States
Canada
To turn the right front passenger’s airbag on, insert your
ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the on position.
Passenger Sensing System
If your instrument panel has one of the indicators
pictured in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system.
1-74
The passenger airbag status indicator on the instrument
panel will be visible when you turn your ignition key
to RUN or START. The words ON and OFF or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible on the instrument
panel during the system check. When the system check
is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or
the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag is not part of the passenger sensing
system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
If your vehicle has a rear seat, it will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-75
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never put a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat the unless passenger airbag status
indicator shows off. Never put a rear facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the
airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag. Be
sure the airbag is off before using a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front seat position.
Eventhough the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
1-76
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator on the
instrument panel will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing System) in
the Index.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position if one is available
and check with your dealer.
1-77
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-27 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-80 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
1-78
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure
to follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-14.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-79
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Also, the airbag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.
1-80
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
the airbag sensing and diagnostic module (located
under the driver’s seat), or the instrument panel
can affect the operation of the airbag system. If you
have questions, call Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Restraint System Check
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, the airbag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
airbag module in the steering wheel or both the
airbag module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag. Do not open or break
the airbag coverings.
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
1-81
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
1-82
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to replace
the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt buckle
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies, even if
the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-27.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Cargo Door Relocking .....................................2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-8
Lockout Protection ..........................................2-9
Sliding Side Door ..........................................2-10
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door ............................2-11
Rear Doors ..................................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-14
Manual Windows ..........................................2-15
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Swing-Out Windows ......................................2-16
Sun Visors ...................................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17
Passlock® ....................................................2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-17
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-17
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-18
Starting the Engine .......................................2-19
Fuel Regulator .............................................2-20
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-20
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-21
Parking Brake ..............................................2-23
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-23
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-25
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-25
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-26
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-27
Mirrors ...........................................................2-28
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-28
Outside Manual Mirror ...................................2-28
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors .........................2-28
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-29
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-30
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-30
Storage Areas ................................................2-30
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door locks. It
will fit with either side up.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the remote keyless entry system operates
on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides the
owner with a pair of identical keys and a bar-coded tag.
The bar-coded tag has a code on it that tells your dealer
or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep
this tag in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be
able to have new ones made easily using this tag.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6.
2-3
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Q(Lock):
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Press this
button once to lock all of
the doors. The parking
lamps will flash and
the interior lamps will turn
on briefly. Press the
lock button again within five
seconds and the parking
lamps will flash and
the horn will chirp briefly.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
W(Unlock):
Press this button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash twice and the
interior lamps will turn on. Press the unlock button
again within five seconds to unlock the remaining doors.
The parking lamps will flash.
2-4
L(Panic Alarm): The remote keyless entry transmitter
comes equipped with an instant panic alarm. To use
the alarm, press the horn symbol while the ignition
is turned off. The horn will sound and both the interior
and exterior lamps will flash for up to thirty seconds.
To stop the instant panic alarm, press the panic button
again, wait for thirty seconds, or start the vehicle.
Resynchronization
j (Cargo Door):
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the lock and unlock
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for seven
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
Press this button to unlock the
cargo doors only.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to the receiver.
The receiver will not respond to a signal that has been
sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
2-5
Battery Replacement
1. Use an object like a coin to pry open the transmitter.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
Youcan tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use an object
like a pencil to remove the old battery. Do not use
a metal object.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
2-6
3. Remove and replace the battery, positive (+)
side down.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
remote keyless entry transmitter for seven seconds
to resynchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with keyless entry, see
Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-3 for more
information.
From the outside, use your key.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To lock the door from the
inside, slide the manual
lever on your door down.
To unlock the door, slide
the manual lever up.
2-7
Power Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
Press the bottom side of
the power door lock switch
to lock all the doors at
once. Press the top side of
the power door lock
switch to unlock all the
doors at once.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle
will not work.
Cargo Door Relocking
This feature protects the owner from having an
unsecured side cargo door. If the side cargo door is
open when the lock button is pressed on the door or
the remote keyless entry transmitter, all doors will lock
and then relock again after the cargo door is closed.
If the cargo door is not closed within several minutes,
the relock will not occur.
2-8
Security locks are located on the side sliding door,
or the front portion of the 60/40 side swing-out door.
They are also located on the passenger side rear cargo
door of some vehicles.
If your vehicle has security
locks on the rear cargo
door, you can lock these
doors so they cannot be
opened from the inside.
Rear Cargo Door
Move the lever down to engage the security feature.
Move the lever up to return the door locks to normal
operation.
Move the button up to
engage the security
feature. Move the button
down to return the
door locks to normal
operation.
Move the button to the
right for the driver’s side
door or to the left for
the passenger’s side door
to engage the security
feature. Move the button to
the left for the driver’s
side door or to the right for
the passenger’s side
door to return the door
locks to normal operation.
60/40 Swing-Out Side
Door; Driver’s Side
Shown, Passenger’s
Side Similar
Side Sliding Door
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when either the
driver’s, passenger’s, or rear door is open, all the doors
will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock. This
feature does not include the side cargo door.
2-9
Sliding Side Door
To open the sliding side door from the outside, pull the
handle toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the
door open.
To close the sliding side door from the outside, use the
handle to slide the door toward the front of the vehicle.
When the door is closed, it will be flush with the side of
the body.
2-10
To open the sliding side door from the inside, turn the
handle upward and toward the rear of the vehicle. Then,
slide the door toward the rear of the vehicle.
To close the sliding side door from the inside, grasp the
handle and slide the door toward the front of the vehicle.
Make sure the door is completely closed before
driving away.
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the inside,
pull the handle toward you and push open the door.
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull out on the handle and pull the door
toward you.
2-11
Rear Doors
{CAUTION:
To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear door and
pull the door toward you.
To close the 60/40 side doors, close the rear door first.
Then close the front door. Check to make sure that
both doors are completely closed.
The front side swing-out door has a check strap
assembly in the door frame to keep the door from
opening beyond 90 degrees.
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the door
partially, pull the check strap toward you and then open
the door. When you close the door, the check strap
will automatically re-engage.
2-12
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To open the rear doors from the outside, pull the handle
toward you to open the passenger side rear door first.
To open the driver side rear door, pull the latch release
at the inside edge of the door.
To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear door
first. Then, close the passenger side rear door.
Check to make sure both doors are completely closed.
2-13
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-14
Manual Windows
Press the bottom of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower the window.
To operate your manual windows, turn the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower your side door windows.
Press the top of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to raise the window.
Power Windows
Express-Down
If you have power
windows, the controls are
located on each of the
side doors.
The driver’s window switch also has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press and hold the side of the
window switch marked AUTO for one second to activate
the express-down mode. This mode can be cancelled
at any time by pressing the opposite side of the switch.
To open the window part way, lightly tap the switch
until the window is at the desired position.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger
window also. Your power windows will work when the
ignition has been turned to RUN or ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-18.
2-15
Swing-Out Windows
Rear Swing-Out Windows
Side Swing-Out Window
To open the side door swing-out window, pull up on the
latch at the edge of the window. Swing the window out
and push down on the latch to lock the window into place.
To close the window, pull the latch toward you and push
down on the latch to lock it.
Your vehicle also has rear swing-out windows.
The rear swing-out windows work the same way as the
side swing out window, but the latch is located at the
bottom edge of the window.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. You can
also swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
You may have visor vanity mirrors, with or without
lamps. Lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on, if you
have them.
2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Passlock®
®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned to
RUN. See Security Light on page 3-40.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this time.
You may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-93. See your dealer for
service.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-37 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-17
Ignition Positions
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
cannot turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the
key or the ignition switch. If none of these works,
then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as the
radio in the accessory ignition position may drain the
battery and prevent your vehicle from starting. Do not
operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition
position for a long period of time.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
2-18
The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will allow
certain features on your vehicle to continue to work
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to
LOCK or until one of the doors is opened.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your
engine will not start in any other position — that is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only. If you have a diesel engine, refer
to the diesel supplement for the starting procedure.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
2-19
Fuel Regulator
Your vehicle has a fuel regulator that shuts the fuel off
when the engine reaches 5,600 rpm.
Engine Coolant Heater
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This
will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord for the engine coolant heater is located
on the driver’s side of the engine compartment and
is attached to the hose for the power steering
reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-20
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-23. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-37.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. With the ignition in RUN,
you must fully apply your regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you continue pressing the brake pedal.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you want. See
Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-25.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
on page 4-29.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
2-21
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If
you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
2-22
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3)
when carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills.
You should use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower
gear) when towing a trailer to minimize heat build-up
and extend the life of your transmission.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on. If you
manually select SECOND (2), the transmission will drive
in SECOND (2). You may use this feature for reducing
torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to
start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transmission will not
shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the handle, located just above
the parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE RELEASE to
release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-37. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-37.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-23
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-24
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-23.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-21.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to LOCK.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive
gear you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
2-25
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
{CAUTION:
Engine and fuel operated heater exhaust can
kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO),
which you cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death. If your vehicle
has a diesel engine and a fuel operated heater,
see “Fuel Operated Heater (FOH)” in the diesel
engine supplement.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
CAUTION:
2-26
(Continued)
(Continued)
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-26.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-25.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-23.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-37.
2-27
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you to restore the mirror to the original
position.
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with this style camper-type
mirrors, they can be
adjusted so you can have
a clear view of any
objects behind you.
If you have a cargo van without the rear door glass,
your vehicle may not have an inside rearview mirror.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little of the
side of your vehicle, and have a clear view of objects
behind you. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow passageways.
2-28
1. To adjust the mirrors
when towing a trailer,
turn the mirror by
pushing the mirror
head toward the
front of the vehicle.
2. Turn the mirror head
so that it swings further
outboard and adjust
the mirror surface
as needed.
Adjust the mirror by rotating it left or right. Once the mirror
is adjusted to the correct position, tighten the set screw,
located at the end of the arm, to hold the mirror in place.
These mirrors can also be manually folded in.
On the lower portion of each mirror is a convex mirror.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see
more from the driver’s seat.
Outside Power Mirrors
If the vehicle has power
mirrors, the control is
located on the driver’s
side door.
If your vehicle is equipped
with this style camper-type
mirrors, they can be
adjusted so you can have
a clear view of the
objects behind you.
Select each mirror by turning the knob clockwise for the
passenger’s side mirror or counterclockwise for the
driver’s side mirror. The center position is neutral.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob in the
desired direction.
2-29
Outside Convex Mirror
Outside Heated Mirrors
Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
If your vehicle is equipped
with outside heated
mirrors, they can be
defrosted by pressing the
mirror button located
near the fan control.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
An indicator light in the button will light when the outside
heated mirrors are activated.
Your rear window defogger comes on when the outside
heated mirrors are on. If your vehicle has a rear
window defogger, see “Rear Window Defogger” in
Climate Control System on page 3-17.
Storage Areas
If equipped, your front storage compartment is at the
center of the instrument panel extension, by the floor.
To open the compartment, pull up on the latch.
The compartment will open automatically.
Storage compartments may also be included on the
inside of each front door.
2-30
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-5
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-14
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-15
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-15
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-15
Exit Lighting .................................................3-15
Reading Lamps ............................................3-15
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-16
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-16
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-17
Climate Controls ............................................3-17
Climate Control System .................................3-17
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-20
Rear Heating System ....................................3-21
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System .......3-21
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-24
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-25
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-25
Engine Speed Limiter ....................................3-25
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-26
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .............3-26
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-27
Airbag Off Light ............................................3-28
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-29
Charging System Light ..................................3-32
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-32
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-33
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-34
StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light ..........................3-34
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..............................3-35
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-36
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-38
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-39
Security Light ...............................................3-40
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-40
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-41
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-41
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Indicator Light .....3-41
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-42
Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-42
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-42
Audio System(s) .............................................3-43
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-44
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-44
3-2
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-45
Radio with CD ..............................................3-47
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-52
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-63
Theft-Deterrent Feature (Non-RDS Radios) .......3-74
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) .............3-74
Radio Reception ...........................................3-75
Care of the Cassette Tape Player ...................3-75
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-76
Care of the CD Player ...................................3-77
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-77
Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-77
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-20.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-24.
D. Shift Lever. See Starting the Engine on page 2-19.
E. Climate Control System. See Climate Control System
on page 3-17.
F. Audio System(s). See Audio System(s) on
page 3-43.
G. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-13.
H. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-37.
I. Rear Heating System (If Equipped). See Rear
Heating System on page 3-21.
J. Accessory Power Outlets/Cigarette Lighter. See
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-16 and
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-17.
K. Airbag Off Switch. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 1-71.
L. Storage Compartment. See Storage Areas on
page 2-30.
M. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped), Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator, and High-Idle System (If Equipped).
See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-9 or Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is
located on top of the
steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-5
Other Warning Devices
The lever is located on the lower left side of the
steering column.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when
you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on
page 3-9.
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer
on page 3-9.
• I Cruise Control. Cruise Control on page 3-10.
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13 later in this section.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 3-8.
3-7
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
23(Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer):
To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, pull the
multifunction lever all the way toward you. Then
release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
If you move the lever all the way up or down, and the
arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers may not see your
turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs or a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-93.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature allows you to use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you
want to pass. It works even if your headlamps are off.
Turn Signal On Chime
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not so
far that you hear it click.
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
If your headlamps are off or on low-beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on and stay on as long
as you hold the lever toward you and the high-beam
indicator on the instrument panel will come on. Release
the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.
3-8
Windshield Wipers
9 (Off):
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
8(Mist):
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
Delay: You can set the wiper speed for a long or short
delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light
rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the
delay.
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Windshield Washer
L(Washer Fluid):
There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
d (Low Speed):
For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings. position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to
off position.
a (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-9
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintain a
speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really
help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at
speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will
disengage.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-10
9(Off):
R(On):
This position turns the system off.
This position activates the system.
S (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T (Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
Setting Cruise Control
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch from on to
resume/accelerate briefly.
{CAUTION:
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate briefly, the
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch
or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
don’t hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The CRUISE light on the instrument panel will illuminate
when the cruise control is engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch to resume/accelerate briefly. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-11
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press and hold the set button at the end of the
lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the set
button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
3-12
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise control switch to off.
• If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® feature, cruise
control will deactivate if road conditions cause
StabiliTrak® to activate.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
; (Parking Lamps):
The control on the driver’s
side of your instrument
panel operates the exterior
lamps.
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
Instrument Panel Lights
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (Canada)
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
If the DRL are active when the control is turned to this
position, the DRL will turn off.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the DRL will remain
active along with the lamps mentioned above.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
Ø (Defeat): Turn the control to this position to turn off
the DRL. Vehicles first sold in Canada cannot turn
off the DRL.
i (Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)):
Turning the
control to this position selects the DRL. When the
vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DRL will turn on,
unless defeated. When the DRL are active, the DRL
indicator will illuminate.
5 (Headlamps):
Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps together with the parking
lamps and turn off the daytime running lamps.
You can switch your headlamps from high to
low-beam by pulling the turn signal/high-beam
lever toward you.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on and
off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away if
this happens.
3-13
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your control is turned
to the headlamps or parking lamps position, your key
is out of the ignition, and your driver’s door is open.
To disable the chime, turn the control to the Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL) position and then back to the
parking lamps or headlamps position.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the headlamps
will go off, and your DRL lamps (parking lamps) will
illuminate.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp control to the
off position or shift into PARK (P). The DRL will stay
off until the control is toggled again or the vehicle
is shifted out of PARK (P).
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the
United States.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Press this knob located
next to the exterior lamps
knob to extend it, and
then turn it to adjust the
instrument panel
brightness.
• the ignition is on,
• the exterior lamps control is in DRL mode and not
in the defeat position.
When the DRL are on, only your parking lamps will
be on. The other lamps will not be on. The instrument
panel will be lit.
3-14
Turn the knob all the way clockwise to turn on the
interior lamps. Press the knob back into its stored
position when not in use.
Dome Lamps
Entry Lighting
The dome lamps will automatically come on when a
door is opened and turn off shortly after all doors
are closed.
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated
entry feature.
Dome Lamp Override
You can use the dome
lamp override button,
located below the exterior
lamp control, to override
the automatic operation of
the dome lamps.
When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come on if
the dome override button is in the out position. If the
dome override button is pressed in, the lamps will
not come on. When the door is closed, the interior lamps
will remain on for a period of 15 seconds or until the
vehicle is started.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for a
period of 40 seconds when you remove the key from the
ignition. The lamps will not come on if the dome
override button is pressed in.
Reading Lamps
To turn the automatic operation of the lamps off, press
the button. The dome lamps will remain off while a
door is open. To return the lamps to automatic
operation, press the button again.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the
button again.
While pressed in, this will override the illuminated entry
feature unless you use your keyless entry transmitter
to unlock the vehicle.
3-15
Battery Run-Down Protection
To use the outlet, lift the cover. When not using it,
always close the cover.
This feature shuts off the exterior and interior lamps if
they are left on after the ignition is turned off. All exterior
lamps will shut off after 10 minutes. Interior cargo
lamps will shut down after 20 minutes and all other
interior lamps after 10 minutes.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets.
If your vehicle has a cigarette lighter/accessory
power outlet, it is located on the driver’s side of the front
storage compartment. The other accessory power
outlet is located on the passenger’s side of the front
storage compartment.
3-16
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have this feature. The front ashtray
can be placed in the instrument panel extension at
the center of the instrument panel. Lift up on the ashtray
door to open it.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back away
from the heating element when it is hot. Damage
from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
3-17
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heating/air
conditioning controls will look like this:
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, then directs most of
the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air may be
directed toward the windshield.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows) and some air directed to
the windshield.
The right knob can also be used to select the defrost
and defog modes. Information on defogging and
defrosting can be found later in this section.
9 (Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
3-18
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
A/C (Air Conditioning): This setting will begin to cool
and dehumidify the air inside of your vehicle.
MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): Turn the right
knob to MAX A/C for maximum cooling. This setting
cools the air the fastest, by recirculating the inside air.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control is used properly.
There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your
windshield and side windows.
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost
mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more
quickly. For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
1(Defrost):
This setting operates the defroster. Most
of the air comes out near the windshield, with some
going to the floor outlets and front side windows. The air
conditioning compressor may operate in this setting to
dehumidify the air.
The defog setting is useful for cold weather with a large
number of passengers or very humid conditions to
help keep the windshield clear. Use defrost to remove
fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extremely
cold conditions. The temperature knob should be in the
red area and the fan control toward high. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Turn the knob on the right of the climate control panel
to select the defog or defrost mode.
-(Defog): With this setting, the outside air comes out
of both the floor and defroster outlets. Adjust the
temperature knob for warmer or cooler air. The air
conditioning compressor may operate in this setting to
dehumidify the air.
3-19
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
Some vehicles may have a rear window defogger.
Use the outlets located near the center and on
the sides of the instrument panel to change the
direction of airflow.
< R. DEF (Rear Defrost):
Press this button to turn
the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the window as possible.
Operation Tips
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window and will only
work when the ignition is RUN.
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
The rear window defogger will turn off several minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger will run for several more minutes before turning
off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3-20
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Rear Heating System
Your vehicle may have a rear heating system that
allows you to adjust the amount of air flowing into the
rear of the vehicle, from the front-seating area. This
feature works with the main climate-control system in
your vehicle.
HI: Turn the thumbwheel to this position to supply
the most amount of heat to the rear-seating area.
LO: Turn the thumbwheel to this position to supply
the least amount of heat to the rear-seating area.
OFF: Turn the thumbwheel to this position to turn
the rear heating system off.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System
Your vehicle may have a rear heating and
air-conditioning system. This system regulates the
temperature, the fan speed and the air delivery for the
rear-seat passengers only. It also works with the
main climate-control system in your vehicle.
REAR HEAT: The thumbwheel for this system is
located to the left of the audio system.
9 (Fan):
Turn the thumbwheel up or down to increase
or decrease the amount of heated air sent to the
rear-seating area.
Front Climate Control Panel
3-21
Use this control panel when you would like to maintain
a separate temperature setting. Adjust the direction
of the airflow or adjust the fan speed for the rear seat
passenger(s).
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
Use this mode to direct air to the upper
outlets, with a little air directed to the floor outlets.
2(Floor): Use this mode to direct most of the air to
the floor outlets.
9 (Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to HIGH, MED (Medium) or LOW to
increase or decrease the fan speed in the rear-seating
area. Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the fan.
Rear Climate Control Panel
If your vehicle has a 135 inch (343 cm) wheelbase, a
rear control panel for this system is located in the
second row behind the driver in the rear of your vehicle.
A rear seat passenger can use this control panel to
personally adjust the temperature, the direction of the
airflow and the fan speed for the rear seating area.
The fan knob located on the front climate control panel
must be turned to REAR CNTL to allow a rear seat
passenger to use the control panel in the rear seating
area. Performing this action disables the front control
panel. To return control to this panel, move the fan knob
out of REAR CNTL.
Turn the center knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to change the direction of the airflow in the rear
seating area.
3-22
Temperature Control: To increase or decrease the
temperature for the rear of the vehicle, turn the
right knob located on the climate-control panel.
The air-conditioning system on the main climate control
panel must be turned on to direct cooled air to the
rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the temperature
in the rear of the vehicle will remain at cabin
temperature.
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear of
any objects so that the air inside of your vehicle can
circulate effectively.
For information on how to use the main climate control
system, see Climate Control System on page 3-17.
For information on ventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on
page 3-20.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help
you locate them.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States version shown, Canada similar
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
3-24
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it.
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries to
turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Engine Speed Limiter
Your vehicle may have this feature. This system
automatically controls top vehicle speed. The system
controller receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor
and reduces power when the vehicle speed reaches the
maximum 65 mph (105 km/h) governed speed.
3-25
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
be provided for several seconds to remind people to
buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light will
also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
If equipped, several seconds after the key is turned to
RUN or START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-74
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will be provided.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-26
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 1-65.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-27
Airbag Off Light
If your vehicle is equipped with an airbag off switch,
when you turn the right front passenger’s airbag off, the
airbag off light will come on and stay on to remind
you that the airbag has been turned off. This light will
go off when you turn the airbag back on again. See
Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this,
including important safety information.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a
crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk group
identified by the national government. See
Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this,
including important safety information.
United States
3-28
Canada
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s airbag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger airbag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
then your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator –
United States
Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator –
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
3-29
If your vehicle has a rear seat, it will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never put a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat the unless passenger airbag status
indicator shows off. Never put a rear facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the
airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
3-30
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be transported in
vehicles with a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
whenever possible.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-74
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-27.
3-31
Charging System Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, before starting
the engine, as a check
to show you it is working.
After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it stays
on or comes on while you are driving, you may have
a problem with your charging system. It could indicate a
problem with the generator drive belt, or some other
charging system problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
on, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position),
this gage shows your
battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
3-32
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
come on when you set your parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If
it stays on after your parking brake is fully released,
it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-35.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
3-33
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds. That’s
normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33
for more information.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-34
StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light
If your vehicle has the
StabiliTrak® system,
this light will come
on according to the
description table for the
StabiliTrak® system.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-9.
You will hear three chimes if the light turns on and
one chime if the light turns off.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If you have the
StabiliTrak® system,
this light will be on or
flashing, according to
the description table for
the StabiliTrak® system.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-9.
You will hear three chimes if the light turns on and
one chime if the light turns off.
If this light remains on steady, your vehicle needs
to be taken in for service.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area your engine
is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
operating conditions, you should pull off the road,
stop your vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon
as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-24.
3-35
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The Check Engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may
not be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
may not be covered by your warranty.
3-36
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Reducing vehicle speed
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-37
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Gage
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-38
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa
(kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problem causing
low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Change Engine Oil Light
This light is displayed
when your vehicle needs
to be serviced.
If your vehicle has a V8 engine and this light is flashing,
it indicates that the oil level is low.
When this light is on steady, your vehicle needs to be
serviced. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
Engine) on page 6-4 for more information.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the change
engine oil light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light
will stay on for a while each time the engine is
started. For more information on resetting the system,
see “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
under Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) on
page 5-16.
3-39
Security Light
United States
Cruise Control Light
Canada
The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the light
flashes, the Passlock® System has entered a tamper
mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®
on page 2-17.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
System. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your GM dealer.
3-40
United States
Canada
The cruise light comes on whenever you set your cruise
control. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more
information.
Reduced Engine Power Light
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
United States
Canada
If the check engine and reduced engine power lights are
on, the throttle may be disabled and a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s performance may occur.
If the reduced engine power light is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time
the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while the reduced engine power light is
on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced.
Anytime the check engine light stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to an authorized GM dealer as soon as
possible for service.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
You have this light on the
instrument panel. It will
light whenever the DRL are
on. It is also a reminder
to turn on your headlamps
when driving at night.
3-41
Tow/Haul Mode Light
Fuel Gage
This message is displayed
when the tow/haul mode
has been activated.
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” in Towing a
Trailer on page 4-37.
Check Gages Warning Light
United States
Canada
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
Listed are four situations you may experience with
your fuel gage:
United States
Canada
This light will come on briefly when you are starting
the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil
pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
3-42
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you
turn off the ignition.
None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.
Audio System(s)
If your vehicle came without a radio, the wiring
provisions for a radio and an antenna were installed at
the assembly plant, so that if you want, a radio can
be installed at the dealer.
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
3-43
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system
can be played even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-18 for
more information.
3-44
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds.
Then press HR until the correct hour appears on
the display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. The time may be set with the
ignition on or off.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to
represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the hour and minute buttons at the same time until RDS
TIME appears on the display. To accept this time, press
and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the same time,
for another two seconds. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to
stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK
arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-45
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: To adjust the bass and the treble, press and
release AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the
display. Then press and hold the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero or T
and a zero will appear on the display.
3-46
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN
will appear on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO
button until BAL appears on the display. Then press and
hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up or the
down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
The fade feature may not be available on all radio
systems.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN
will appear on the display.
Radio with CD
Radio Messages
CAL (Calibration): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealer for service.
Playing the Radio
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to the dealer for service.
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
3-47
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, and AM. The display will show the selection.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK
arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations, with a strong
signal, that are in the selected band.
3-48
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the AUDIO button until BAS or TRE appears on
the display. Then press and hold the up or the down
arrow to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold the AUDIO button for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and
a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to the time of day. Then press and hold
the AUDIO button for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to the time of day. Then press and hold
the AUDIO button for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Messages
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO
button until BAL appears on the display. Then press and
hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
CAL (Calibration): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealer for service.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the AUDIO button until
FAD appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to the dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer.
The fade feature may not be available on all radio
systems.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
3-49
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
CD will appear on the display. If you want to insert a
CD with the ignition off, first press the eject button or
the RCL knob.
If you insert a CD with the radio off and the ignition on,
it will start to play
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
3-50
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-76 for
more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. The track number will appear on
the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
The track number will appear on the display. If this
pushbutton is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RND will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play. OFF will appear on the display.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. RPT will appear on the display.
The current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT
again to turn off repeat play. OFF will appear on
the display.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track. The track number
will appear on the display. If either arrow is held
or pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see the current track
number or how long the current track has been
playing.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CD will appear on the display if a CD is
loaded.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
If the CD is not removed after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If the CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second
time period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it manually. The player’s
25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,
causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
3-51
CD Messages
Radio with Cassette and CD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
Radio Data System (RDS)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
3-52
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will
now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL
OFF appears on the display.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. When the ignition is off, press this knob to
display the time.
3-53
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2
or AM. The display will show the selection.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2 and six AM), can be
programed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
o TUNE p:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-54
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2 or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and
classical. Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble
settings.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
The fade feature may not be available on all radio
systems.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold
it until the radio produces one beep. The balance and
fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the
display will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
3-55
Finding a Program Type (PTY)
Station (RDS)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed,
go back to Step 1.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit
program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-56
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two
seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
at a station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS)
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-57
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject button or
the INFO knob to insert and to begin play of a tape.
If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The cassette
tape symbol will appear on the display and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape
player will play the other side of the tape when it
reaches the end.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-58
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous selection on the tape if the current selection
has been playing for less than three seconds. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing
from three to 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning
of the previous selection or the beginning of the current
selection, depending on the position on the tape. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to −9.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times, in next
mode, will increase the number of selections to be
searched forward. SEEK and a positive number
will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
Select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio will play while the
tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display. Select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
© SEEK ¨: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
© SCAN ¨:
Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next selection, play for 10 seconds,
then go on to the next selection. Press either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. The
tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape
or CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape
or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a tape when it is
playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may
be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed
first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play due to one of the
following errors:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your
player is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
3-59
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of the Cassette Tape Player on page 3-75.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display
and the tape symbol on the display will flash,
indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
3-60
Playing a CD
Insert a CD part way into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off,
first press the eject button or the INFO knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-76 for
more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If this pushbutton is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
© SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-61
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette
tape or CD when listening to the radio. The inactive
tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
3-62
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
If the CD is not removed after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If the CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second
time period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it manually. The player’s
25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,
causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
CD Messages
Radio with Six-Disc CD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
Playing the Radio
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOLUME p: Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
3-63
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then press and
hold the knob until you hear a beep. The selected
display will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AUTO
VOL OFF appears on the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
o TUNE p:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN appears on
the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSC will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-64
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Middle/Treble)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is weak
or noisy, decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio
will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the
middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQ
button until CUSTOM appears on the display. Then
manually adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using the
AUDIO knob.
3. To resave the preset, press and hold the preset
button until a beep is heard.
3-65
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Data System (RDS)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the front or the rear speakers.
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
The fade feature may not be available on all radio
systems.
• Display messages from radio stations
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob while BAL or FAD
is displayed. The radio will produce one beep and adjust
the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob while no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
3-66
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either the
TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you
to the PTY’s first station.
4. To cancel the seek, press any of the TYPE or
SEEK arrows. This will also exit the program
type seek mode and return to the last tuned station.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning
the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
scanning.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
3-67
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
3-68
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-76 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
MULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.
3-69
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
CD
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
EJECT ALL will appear on the display.
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD # will
appear on the display. The CD will eject and can
be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button (if not already in CD mode), then press the
numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD. A
small bar will appear under the CD number that is
playing and the track number will appear on the display.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time
period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
3-70
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display. Release the button to play the
passage.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display. Release the button to play the
passage.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order,
on one CD or on all of the CDs. To use random,
do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track (if more than 10 seconds have played),
or to go to the previous track (if less than 10 seconds
have played). Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD.
3-71
©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then press
and hold the knob until the radio beeps. The selected
display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song
list mode. S-LIST should not appear on the
display. If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST
button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will sound to confirm
the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
3-72
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return
to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will be heard to confirm that
the track has been deleted.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks
are moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
3-73
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-74
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOC will appear on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
Radio Reception
Care of the Cassette Tape Player
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
AM
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
3-75
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on the radio may recognize it as a
broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the
cut tape detection feature will be active again.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
3-76
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Chime Level Adjustment
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
will appear on the radio display. Each time the chime
volume is changed, three chimes will sound to indicate
the change. Removing the radio and not replacing it
with a factory radio or chime module will disable
vehicle chimes.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
3-77
✍ NOTES
3-78
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Locking Rear Axle ..........................................4-8
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-9
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .......................4-11
Steering ......................................................4-12
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-14
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-16
Driving at Night ............................................4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-18
City Driving ..................................................4-20
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-23
Winter Driving ..............................................4-25
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-29
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-30
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-30
Towing ..........................................................4-35
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-35
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-35
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-37
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-10.
4-2
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC limit
for all commercial drivers in the United States is
0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in
a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the
chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-5
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-34.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Locking Rear Axle
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak® System
mean there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
2 miles (3.2 km) of driving before the system initializes.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, it combines anti-lock
brake, traction and stability control systems and
helps the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle in most driving conditions.
The following chart describes the StabiliTrak® not
ready light and the StabiliTrak® indicator light.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure that it is working properly. You may hear or
feel the system working. This is normal and does not
StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Off
Off
Off
Flashing
Off
On
On
Off
On
Flashing
Meaning
StabiliTrak® is enabled, but
not active.
The traction control is not active.
StabiliTrak® is active, or the traction
control is active.
StabiliTrak® is disabled due to
system fault. When on after
restarting, the vehicle needs
to be serviced.
StabiliTrak® is disabled due to
system initialization or the driver
has disabled with switch.
StabiliTrak® is not initialized and
not disabled.
The traction control is active.
4-9
For more information, see StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light
on page 3-34 and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light on
page 3-35.
Pressing and holding the
StabiliTrak® button located
on the instrument panel
for more than five seconds
can turn off StabiliTrak®
and part of the traction
control system.
For your safety, the system can only be disabled when
the vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (32 km/h).
You will hear three chimes and the StabiliTrak® not
ready light will come on.
To turn on the StabiliTrak® system, press the
StabiliTrak® button again. StabiliTrak® will automatically
turn back on when the vehicle speed exceeds
20 mph (32 km/h). You will hear one chime and the
StabiliTrak® not ready light will turn off.
When the StabiliTrak® system has been turned off you
may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
4-10
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
attempt to free it. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-29.
StabiliTrak® System Operation
The StabiliTrak® system is normally on, except when the
system is initializing or has been disabled with the
StabiliTrak® button. The StabiliTrak® system will
automatically activate to assist the driver in maintaining
vehicle directional control in most driving conditions.
When activated, the StabiliTrak® system may reduce
engine power to the wheels and apply braking to
individual wheels as necessary to assist the driver with
vehicle directional control. If your vehicle is in cruise
control when the system activates, the StabiliTrak®
indicator light on the instrument panel will flash, and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When the
StabiliTrak® system is no longer active, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-10.
The StabiliTrak® system may also turn off automatically
if it determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting
the vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Traction Control Operation
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
®
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
If the brake-traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed
braking, the brake-traction control will be automatically
disabled. The system will come back on after the
brakes have cooled. This can take up to two minutes or
longer depending on brake usage.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive, your engine’s driving
power is sent to all four wheels for extra traction
when needed.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It
is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
You may experience a brief vehicle vibration upon
acceleration when driving in slippery conditions. This is
normal and is an indication that the all-wheel drive
system is functioning properly.
4-11
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-12
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demand too much of those places.
You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and to
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-14
crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it is all right to pass,
providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your passenger side outside mirror is convex. The
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away
from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
4-15
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-16
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made
much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the
glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean
glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract
repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-18
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-52.
4-19
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
4-21
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
4-22
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
4-24
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
Winter Driving
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-52.
4-25
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-26
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on
a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-7.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-27
{CAUTION:
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe and/or the fuel
operated heater exhaust system, if equipped.
And check around again from time to time to
be sure snow does not collect there. If your
vehicle has a diesel engine and a fuel operated
heater, see “Fuel Operated Heater (FOH)” in
the diesel engine supplement.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery (or batteries) charged.
4-28
You will need a well-charged battery (or batteries) to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later
on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.
4-29
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-35.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
4-30
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-52
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-31
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-37 for
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
4-32
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo Weight
=
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (136 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo Weight
=
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-33
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the
size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation
pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
4-34
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Towing
{CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you carry inside your
vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy
and install the new equipment.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy” (towing your vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.
4-35
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed.
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-36
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off the ground.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Dolly Towing
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from
the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-23 for more information.
3. Put the automatic transmission in PARK (P).
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach
and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and
then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle. Make
sure the wheels are straight before towing.
Use an adequate clamping device to ensure that
the front wheels are locked into the straight position.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for
six weeks or more, remove the battery cable
from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to
prevent your battery from draining while towing.
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
two wheels on the ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off the ground.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
4-37
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
• See also “Driving on Grades” later in this section.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is
pulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is most
useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain, in
stop-and-go traffic, or when you need improved
low-speed control, such as when parking. The purpose
of the tow/haul mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts,
• provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded,
• improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity.
4-38
Press this button located
to the right of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel to turn tow/haul
mode on and off.
Tow/haul is most effective when the vehicle and trailer
combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle’s
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weight
of the Trailer” later in this section.
Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavy load will
cause reduced fuel economy and unpleasant engine
and transmission driving characteristics, but will
not cause damage.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
While activated, the
indicator light on the
instrument panel will
be on.
Tow/haul mode will turn off automatically when the
ignition is turned off. See Tow/Haul Mode Light
on page 3-42.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
4-39
The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh, based upon vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
G1500 Cargo Van 2WD
4300 V6
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
3.42
3.42
3.73
4,300 lbs (1 950 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
5,900 lbs (2 676 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
3.42
3.73
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
G1500 Passenger Van 2WD
4300 V6
3.42
3.42
5300 V8
3.73
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
3,900 lbs (1 769 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
H1500 Passenger Van AWD
3.42
5300 V8
3.73
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
5300 V8
Vehicle
H1500 Cargo Van AWD
5300 V8
4-40
Vehicle
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD
4300 V6
4800 V8
5300 V8
6000 V8
6600 V8 Diesel
Vehicle
H2500 Cargo Van AWD
5300 V8
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
3.73
3.73
4.10
3.73
3.73
4.10
3.73
4,600 lbs (2 086 kg)
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
6,600 lbs (2 994 kg)
8,300 lbs (3 765 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
3.73
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
4300 V6
3.73
3.73
4800 V8
4.10
5300 V8
3.73
3.73
6000 V8
4.10
6600 V8 Diesel
3.73
4,400 lbs (1 996 kg)
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
7,100 lbs (3 220 kg)
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
GCWR
10,000 lbs
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
12,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
10,000 lbs
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
12,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
(4 536 kg)
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(5 443 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
(4 536 kg)
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(5 443 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
4-41
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
3.73
5,800 lbs (2 631 kg)
4800 V8
4.10
6,800 lbs (3 084 kg)
3.73
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)
6000 V8
4.10
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
6600 V8 Diesel
3.73
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
3.73
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
4800 V8
4.10
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
3.73
8,200
lbs (3 719 kg)
6000 V8
4.10
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
6600 V8 Diesel
3.73
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
3.73
4800 V8
4.10
3.73
6000 V8
4.10
6600 V8 Diesel
3.73
4-42
Maximum Trailer Weight
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
GCWR
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
GCWR
12,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
(5 443 k3)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
GCWR
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
3.73
7,700 lbs (3 483 kg)
6000 V8
4.10
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
6600 V8 Diesel
3.73
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
3.73
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
6000 V8
4.10
9,400 lbs (4 264 kg)
6600 V8 Diesel
3.73
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo equipment
and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not
be exceeded.
GCWR
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
17,000 lbs (7 711 kg)
GCWR
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
17,000 lbs (7 711 kg)
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-43
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30
about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying hitch.
4-44
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to
a maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If
they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight
itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but
within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to
trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to
avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the
effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
4-45
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The
only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these
ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you
don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
4-46
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could be
damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer
and the bumper.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh
more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when you’re driving. You should always use a sway
control if your trailer will weigh more than these limits.
You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you’re using the wiring provided with the
factory-installed trailering package, you should not need
to make any holes in the body of your vehicle.
However, if you have an aftermarket hitch installed, you
may need to make holes in the body.
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you
remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into
your vehicle as well as dirt and water. See “Carbon
Monoxide” under Engine Exhaust on page 2-26.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, your
trailer brake system cannot tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system.
4-47
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can not see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-26. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Climate Control System
in the Index.
4-48
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included
in the optional trailering package).
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions.
4-49
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-24.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheels into the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
4-50
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring package includes
a seven-wire harness assembly at the rear of the
vehicle and a four-wire harness assembly under the left
hand side of the instrument panel. The seven-wire
harness assembly is taped together and located in a
frame pocket at the driver side rear left corner of
the frame. The seven-wire harness includes a 30-amp
feed wire. Both harnesses come without connectors and
should be wired by a qualified electrical technician.
The technician can use the following color code chart
when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer
and trailer brake controller.
Seven-Wire Harness
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Light Green: Back-up lamps
Brown: Parking lamps
Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal
Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal
Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes
Orange: Trailer accessory
White (heavy gage): Ground wire
Four-Wire Harness (Trailer Brake Controller)
•
•
•
•
Black: Ground
Red/White Stripe: Fused Battery
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Feed
Light Blue: Fused Stoplamp/CHMSL
4-51
✍ NOTES
4-52
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) ..........................5-13
Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) ........5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-17
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-19
Engine Coolant .............................................5-21
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-24
Engine Overheating .......................................5-24
Cooling System ............................................5-26
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-32
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-32
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34
Brakes ........................................................5-35
Battery ........................................................5-38
Jump Starting ...............................................5-39
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-43
Rear Axle .......................................................5-44
Front Axle ......................................................5-44
Noise Control System .....................................5-45
Tampering with Noise Control System
Prohibited .................................................5-45
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-46
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-46
Headlamps ..................................................5-47
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ..........................................5-48
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-49
Taillamps .....................................................5-49
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-51
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................5-52
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-56
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-59
Dual Tire Operation .......................................5-60
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-61
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-63
Buying New Tires .........................................5-63
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-65
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-67
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-67
Tire Chains ..................................................5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-69
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-70
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-71
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ..........................................5-74
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-79
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-82
Spare Tire ...................................................5-83
Appearance Care ............................................5-84
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-84
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-85
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-86
5-2
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-86
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-86
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-87
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-87
Finish Care ..................................................5-87
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-88
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-89
Tires ...........................................................5-89
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-90
Finish Damage .............................................5-90
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-90
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-90
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-91
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-92
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-92
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-92
Electrical System ............................................5-93
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-93
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-93
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-93
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-93
Floor Console Fuse Block ..............................5-94
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-95
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-98
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-14.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-79.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the DURAMAX®
Diesel Supplement.
For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 in
Canada. Some gasolines may contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors
recommends against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 for additional
information.
5-5
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-36. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
5-6
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
5-8
The tethered fuel cap is
located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s
side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-87.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-36.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-36.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine or fuel
operated heater (FOH) parts and start a fire.
These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant,
brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located in front of
the driver’s side door
frame near the floor.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up the
secondary hood release, which is located
underneath the middle of the hood.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in
the hood.
If your vehicle has an underhood lamp, it will
automatically come on and stay on until the hood
is closed.
Before closing the hood, be sure all of the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on
the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer.
Let the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.
B. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-24.
C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-26.
D. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-19.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-13.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-13.
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-32.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-35.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Oil” in
the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-13
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-98.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-14
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
5-15
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline
Engine)
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-16
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light will come on.
See Change Engine Oil Light on page 3-39. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system may not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has GM-trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset
the system. It is also important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil
light being turned on, reset the system.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
3. If the Change Engine Oil light flashes for five
seconds, the system is reset.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
To reset the change engine oil light, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
4. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the change engine oil light comes back on when you
start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still does not reset, see
your dealer for service. See Change Engine Oil Light
on page 3-39.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
The engine air cleaner/filter is located near the center of
the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-17
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4 for more
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
1. Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover.
2. Lift the filter out of the engine air cleaner/filter
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
3. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter housing.
5-18
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. Make
sure that the filter fits properly into the housing.
5. Reinstall the cover and fasten the retaining clips.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine) on
page 6-6, and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline
Engine) on page 6-13.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
5-19
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
is located near the center
of the engine compartment
and will be labeled with
the graphic shown.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
5-20
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for
a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched
area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick
pointed down to get an accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-13.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission
dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline
Engine) on page 6-13.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-24.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, radiator
and fuel operated heater (FOH) corrosion. In
addition, the engine coolant may require changing
sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-21
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
5-22
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-13 for
more information.
Checking Coolant for Gasoline Engines
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Checking
Coolant” under “Van Models” in the DURAMAX® Diesel
Supplement for information on checking your vehicle’s
coolant.
The coolant recovery tank
is located near the center
of the engine
compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD
FILL mark, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-26.
5-23
Radiator Pressure Cap
The radiator pressure cap is located near the center of
the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on
your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-35 for more information.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-24
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-37.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-25
Cooling System
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Van Models”
under “Cooling System” in the DURAMAX® Diesel
Supplement.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL mark. If it is not, you may
have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
5-26
{CAUTION:
Heater, fuel operated heater (FOH), radiator
hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot.
Do not touch them. If you do, you can be
burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
5-27
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank for Gasoline Engines
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “How to
Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank” under “Van
Models” in the Cooling System section of the
DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement for the proper coolant
fill procedure.
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-21 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
5-28
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
components in the engine compartment.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will
burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not
spill coolant on a hot engine or components in
the engine compartment.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
COLD FILL mark, start your vehicle.
5-29
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator for
Gasoline Engines
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “How to Add
Coolant to the Radiator” under “Van Models” in the
Cooling System section of the DURAMAX® Diesel
Supplement for the proper radiator fill procedure.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.
5-30
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-21 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
5-31
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases as the clutch more fully engages, so
you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is
normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission
slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling
system functioning properly. The fan will slow down
when additional cooling is not required and the clutch
partially disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
5-32
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located in the
engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
The level should be at the COLD FILL mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
To prevent contamination of brake fluid, never check or
fill the power steering reservoir with the brake master
cylinder cover off.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine)
on page 6-13. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to
use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with
a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
5-33
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
What to Use
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-34
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine and/or fuel operated heater parts, if
equipped. If your vehicle has a diesel engine
and a fuel operated heater, see “Fuel Operated
Heater (FOH)” in the diesel engine supplement.
The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic
system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this
section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4.
5-35
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not, have your brake
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
(Gasoline Engine) on page 6-13.
5-36
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-87.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
5-37
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system —for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
battery location.
5-38
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-39 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-39
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on
the battery.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind a
red plastic cover near the engine accessory drive
bracket on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, below the alternator. To uncover
the remote positive (+) terminal, open the red
plastic cover.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on the
engine drive bracket on all V8 engines and is
marked GND (Ground).
On V6 engines the remote negative (−) terminal is
located on a tab attached to the engine accessory
drive bracket and is marked GND (Ground).
5-40
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-41
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does
not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal for this purpose. It is
marked GND.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
5-42
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-13.
5-43
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
If you have the 1500 Series, the proper level is from
5/8 inch (15 mm) to 1 5/8 inch (40 mm) below the bottom
of the filler plug hole. The proper level for the 2500
and 3500 Series is from 0 to 1/4 (6 mm) below
the bottom of the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid
to reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-13.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on
page 6-4.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-44
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you may need to add
some lubricant.
Noise Control System
Tampering with Noise Control
System Prohibited
The following information relates to compliance with
federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
provides information on maintaining the noise control
system to minimize degradation of the noise emission
control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise
control system warranty is given in your warranty booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 3/8 inch (10 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-13.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance,
repair or replacement, of any device or element of
design incorporated into any new vehicle for
the purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or
delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered inoperative
by any person.
5-45
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
Bulb Replacement
Insulation:
• Removal of the noise shields or any underhood
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-50.
insulation.
Engine:
• Removal or rendering engine speed governor (if
equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
Fan and Drive:
• Removal of fan clutch (if equipped) or rendering
clutch inoperative.
• Removal of the fan shroud (if equipped).
Air Intake:
• Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
• Modification of the air cleaner.
Exhaust:
• Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
• Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust
pipe clamps.
5-46
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
4. Lift the inboard side of the headlamp to release the
inboard tab from the radiator support.
To remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle and
access the bulbs, do the following:
5. Lift the outboard side of the headlamp to release
the outboard tab from the radiator support.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
6. Lower the headlamp to allow the vertical adjustor to
clear the tie bar.
2. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp assembly.
7. Turn the headlamp forward and upward to remove
it from the grille.
8. Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and pull it
out of the housing.
9. Without removing the headlamp assembly itself,
remove the bulb socket from the back of the
headlamp on the driver’s side.
10. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to
remove it from the socket.
11. On the passenger’s side, turn the bulb clockwise
one turn.
3. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp
assembly. To remove the pins, turn the outer pin
clockwise and pull it straight up. To remove
the inner pin, turn it counterclockwise and pull it
straight up.
5-47
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
To replace the front turn signal, sidemarker and/or
parking lamp bulb(s), do the following:
12. Install the new bulb into the socket then reinstall it
into the headlamp assembly.
13. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
5-48
1. Use a small tool to unlatch the outboard clip on
the lamp.
2. Pull the lamp forward to completely unlatch the clip.
Move the lamp outboard to loosen the tabs.
3. Remove the lamp from the grille.
4. Squeeze the tab on the side of the bulb socket
while turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb socket from the back of the lamp
assembly.
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it in the
lamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL) is located
above the rear doors at the center of the vehicle.
To replace a bulb, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws from the CHMSL assembly.
2. Remove the assembly.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to
remove it from the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
Taillamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the
two inboard nuts
from the inside
of the taillamp
assembly.
2. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward to clear
the studs.
3. Slide the taillamp assembly slightly upward to
release the lower clip.
4. Remove the three nuts on the taillamp assembly.
5. Remove the taillamp assembly from the vehicle.
5. Reverse the steps to reinstall the assembly.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, as in a
luggage carrier, care should be taken not to block
or damage the center high-mounted stoplamp unit.
5-49
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up, Rear Parking,
Stoplamp, and Turn Signal Lamp
CHMSL
Front Parking and Turn
Signal Lamp
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Headlamps
Composite High-Beam
Composite Low-Beam
Sealed Beam Headlamp
6. Remove the bulb socket by squeezing the tab on
the side of the socket while turning it
counterclockwise.
7. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Install a new bulb.
9. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillamp assembly.
5-50
Bulb Number
3157
912
3157KX
194
9005
9006GS
H6054
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
Engine) on page 6-4 for more information on wiper blade
inspection.
3. The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notched end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To remove the type with a
release clip, do the following:
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the notched
end last, into the end with two blade claws. Then
slide the insert all the way through the blade claws
at the opposite end.
1. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical
position.
5. Make sure that the notches are locked by the
bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws
are properly locked on both sides of the insert slot.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull it up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
into the windshield.
5-51
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
5-52
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-30.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-59.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-65.
5-53
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-59 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-30.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
5-54
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed
to support that load when used as a single. For
information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation
- Tire Pressure on page 5-59 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-30.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S.
Tire and Rim Association.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the
light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
5-55
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
5-56
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-59 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
5-57
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-63.
5-58
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-65.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Premature or irregular wear
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
Poor handling
When to Check
Reduced fuel economy
Check your tires once a month or more.
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-59
How to Check
Dual Tire Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are
cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel
bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper wheel nut tightening
information, see “Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire” later in this section, under Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-70. Also see “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-98.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more
evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-61. Also
see Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on
page 6-4.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
{CAUTION:
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is
badly underinflated, the tire can overheat. An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch
fire. You or others could be injured. Be sure all
tires (including the spare) are properly inflated.
See Tires on page 5-52 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59 for more information on proper tire inflation.
5-60
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-63 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-67 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see Dual Tire
Operation on page 5-60.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4.
Single Rear Wheels
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always use the
correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating your
vehicle’s tires. Do not include the spare tire in the tire
rotation, if the spare tire/wheel assembly does not match
your vehicle’s road tires and wheels in size and type.
5-61
{CAUTION:
Dual Rear Wheels
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, always use one of
the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure that vent holes in
the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-30. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-98.
5-62
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-70.
When It Is Time for New Tires
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
5-63
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS,
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 5-53 for additional information.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires)
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
5-64
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30, for more information
about the Tire and Loading Information Label.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction
control; and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-63 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-65
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-66
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-98.
5-67
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has dual wheels or P235/75R16,
P245/75R16 or LT245/75R16 size tires, do not
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin the vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
5-68
Notice: If your vehicle does not have dual wheels
and is equipped with a tire size other than
P235/75R16, P245/75R16 or LT245/75R16, use tire
chains only where legal and only when you
must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Do not
use chains on the tires of the front axle. Tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-5 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
CAUTION:
5-70
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If you have a cargo van or a passenger van, the
equipment you will need is located in the passenger
side rear corner of the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing
bolt and lift it off of the
mounting bracket.
To access the equipment, remove the retaining wing
bolt and lift it out of the mounting bracket.
If you have a van with the 15-passenger seating
arrangement, the equipment you will need is secured on
the rear floor of the passenger side of the vehicle.
5-71
To lower the spare tire from the vehicle, do the following:
1. Attach the wheel
wrench and ratchet,
with the DOWN
side facing you.
The wheel wrench
has a socket end and
a flat chisel end.
Note that there is an
UP side and a DOWN
side on the ratchet.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), jack
handle extension (B), jack handle (C), wheel wrench (D),
and the ratchet (E).
The spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your
vehicle. You will use the wheel wrench (D) and
the ratchet (E) to lower the spare tire from the vehicle.
5-72
2. Put the flat chisel end of the wheel wrench on an
angle through the hole between the body and the
bumper. Be sure the flat end connects into the
hoist shaft.
3. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground. If the spare tire does
not lower to the ground, the secondary latch
is engaged causing the tire not to lower. See
Secondary Latch System on page 5-79.
4. When the tire has been lowered, pull the tire toward
you so you can reach the tire retainer and pull it up
through the wheel opening.
If you have a vehicle which was completed from a cab
and chassis, refer to the information from the body
supplier/installer.
The spare tire is a full-size tire, like the other tires on
your vehicle.
5-73
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
If your vehicle has plastic wheel nut caps, loosen them
by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The
wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center
cap. Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel
end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry it out.
1. With the DOWN side facing you, use the ratchet
and wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
2. Assemble the jack and tools for a front or rear flat
as follows:
Front Position
Front Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the
jack handle (B) and ratchet (C) as shown. Be
sure that the ratchet has the UP mark facing you.
5-74
Rear Position
Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the
jack handle (B), jack handle extension (C) and
ratchet (D) as shown. Be sure that the ratchet has
the UP mark facing you. To assemble the jack
handle and jack handle extension, use the art
and text following.
Connect the jack handle (B) and jack handle
extension (C) together and press the retention
clip (arrow) so it engages.
Front Position
5-75
3. Position the jack under
the vehicle as shown.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Rear Position
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-76
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the ratchet clockwise.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to fit.
5. Remove all the
wheel nuts.
6. Take flat tire off of the mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
5-77
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-98 for wheel nut
torque specification.
8. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each wheel
nut by hand until
the wheel is held
against the hub.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-78
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-98 for the wheel nut torque
specification.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off the vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is
damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must
be stowed with the valve stem pointing down.
See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-82
for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.
10. Use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts firmly.
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise and in a
crisscross sequence as shown.
11. Put the wheel cover or the center cap and plastic
wheel nut caps back on. Remove any wheel
blocks.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
5-79
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do
the following:
2. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not visible,
start this procedure at
Step 6.
3. Connect the jack handle (C) and jack handle
extension (B) together and press the retention
clip (arrow) so it engages.
4. Attach the jack handle/jack handle extension to the
jack. With the UP mark facing you, slide the ratchet
onto the end of the jack handle extension. The
set-up should look like the picture above.
5-80
8. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, slide the
ratchet onto the wheel wrench and insert the
wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole above the
bumper. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the spare the rest of the way. Be sure the
DOWN mark on the ratchet is facing you.
9. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
5. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire and turn the
handle clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the
secondary latch spring.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. This lets
you know that the secondary latch has released.
The spare tire is now balancing on the jack.
7. Lower the jack by turning the ratchet
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
10. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, return to Step 4 of
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on
page 5-74.
5-81
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the
wheel, making sure it is properly attached.
3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle,
keeping the cable tight.
4. With the UP side facing you, attach the ratchet to
the wheel wrench.
5. Put the flat end of the wheel wrench on an
angle through the hole in the rear door frame,
above the bumper.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet until the tire
is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist
cannot be overtightened.
5-82
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-59 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instructions on how to remove,
install or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-74 and
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-82.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the ratchet to tighten the cable.
You will hear two clicks when the tire is up
all the way.
8. Return the jacking equipment to the proper location.
Secure the items and replace the jack cover.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires — those originally installed on your
vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use on your
vehicle, so it’s all right to drive on it.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and
type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
5-83
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
5-84
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
soils, always try to remove them first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
5-85
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-86
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline
Engine) on page 6-13.
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-91.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-91. Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-87.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
5-87
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
5-88
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-89
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-90
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Swirl Remover Polish
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Description
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
5-91
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the front passenger door
frame. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label you will find the following:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-92
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-79.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the lamp switch. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to flicker on and off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause wiper
linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from
the windshield before using the windshield wipers. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem and
not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
5-93
Floor Console Fuse Block
The floor console fuse block is located under the
driver’s seat.
Fuse
5
6
7
8
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5-94
Usage
Spare
Outside Rear View Mirror
Courtesy Lamp/SEO
Left Rear Stop/Turn Signal
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
32
33
Usage
Cargo Locks
Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal
Driver Locks
Stop/Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp
Climate Control 1
Climate Control
Brakes
Heated Mirror/Defogger
Right Rear Blower
Driver Turn Mirror
Door Locks
Upfitter Park
Not Available
Left Rear Park Lamp
Pass Turn Mirror
Right Rear Park Lamp
Trailer Park Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Auxilary 1
Auxilary 2
Relays
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Usage
Window Residual Accessory Power
Auxiliary
Right Rear Defogger
Courtesy Lamp
Cargo Unlock
Driver Unlock
Park Lamp
Door Locks
Passenger Unlock
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The fuse block is located in the engine compartment on
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Circuit Breaker
Usage
34
Power Window
Fuse
1
2
3
4
Usage
Radio Battery
Powertrain Control Module Battery
(Gas), FOH, Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
Battery (Diesel)
Left Rear Turn Lamp
Right Rear Turn Lamp
5-95
Fuse
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
5-96
Usage
Back-up Lamps Trailer Wiring
Ignition 0
Stoplamp
Rear Defogger/Heated Mirror
Right Daytime Running Lamp/Turn
Signal
Left Daytime Running Lamp/Turn
Signal
Truck Body Control Module 4
Fuel Pump
Trailer
Hazard Flashers
Horn
Truck Body Control Module 3
Trailer Stop/Turn Signal
Truck Body Control Module 2
Truck Body Control Module
Remote Function Actuator
Engine 2 (Gas), Spare (Diesel)
Ignition E
Engine 1
Truck Body Control Module Ignition 1
Spare (Gas), Fuel Heater (Diesel)
Inside Rearview Mirror
Fuse
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Usage
Crankcase
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
System
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Cigarette Lighter
Instrument Panel Cluster
Air Conditioning
Spare (Gas), Engine Control Module
(Diesel)
Canister Vent Solenoid (Gas), Rear
Fog Lamps (Diesel)
Spare
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock,
Vehicle Back-Up
Airbag
Powertrain Control Module Ignition 1
(Gas), Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module, Glow
Plug Control Module Ignition 1
(Diesel)
Oxygen Sensor B (Gas), Spare
(Diesel)
Oxygen Sensor A
Windshield Wipers
Right Headlamp - Low Beam
Left Headlamp - Low Beam
Fuse
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
63
64
Usage
Left Headlamp - High Beam
Right Headlamp - High Beam
Truck Body Controller- Accessory
(Gas), Truck Body Controller,
Transmission Control Module
Accessory (Diesel)
Front Windshield Wiper
Anti-lock Brakes, Vehicle Stability
Enhancement System
Ignition A
Trailer
Climate Control Blower
Ignition B
Spare (Gas), Engine Control Module
Actuator (Diesel)
Spare
Relays
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SPARE (G),
ECM (D)
STRTR
Usage
Windshield Wiper
Air Conditioning
Spare (Gas), Rear Fog Lamps
(Diesel)
Headlamp - High Beam
Fuel Pump
Headlamp - Low Beam
Horn
Spare (Gas), Engine Control
Module (Diesel)
Starter
Circuit Breaker
PWR SEAT
Power Seat
Usage
5-97
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-13 for more information. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level
or as recommended in this manual.
See refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.
Application
Capacities
English
Cooling System
4300 V6
11.0 qt
4800 V8, 5300 V8
13.4 qt
6000 V8
14.8 qt
Cooling System with Rear Heat
4300 V6
14.0 qt
4800 V8, 5300 V8
16.4 qt
6000 V8
17.8 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
4300 V6
4.5 qt
4800 V8, 5300 V8
6.0 qt
6000 V8
6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
Standard Tank (Passenger and Cargo)
31.0 gal
Standard Tank (Cab and Chassis)
33.0 gal
Optional Tank (Cab and Chassis)*
57.0 gal
* 159 inch (4 039 mm) wheelbase or 177 inch (4 496 mm) wheelbase only
5-98
Metric
10.4 L
12.7 L
14.0 L
13.2 L
15.5 L
17.0 L
4.3 L
5.7 L
5.7 L
117.3 L
124.9 L
215.7 L
Capacities
English
Metric
Wheel Nut Torque
140 ft lb
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Application
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4300 V6
X
Automatic
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
VORTEC™ 4800 V8
V
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
T
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 6000 V8
U
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
5-99
✍ NOTES
5-100
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) .........6-4
Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine) ....6-6
Maintenance Footnotes (Gasoline Engine) ..........6-8
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) .......................6-10
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-10
At Least Once a Month .................................6-10
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
(Gasoline Engine) ......................................6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-15
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Requirements
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the
DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Introduction
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
Engine) on page 6-4 should be performed when
indicated. See Additional Required Services (Gasoline
Engine) on page 6-6 and Maintenance Footnotes
(Gasoline Engine) on page 6-8 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
6-3
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
(Gasoline Engine) on page 6-13 and Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15. When
your vehicle is serviced, make sure these are used.
All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs
done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
We recommend the use of genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel Engine Supplement.
6-4
When the change engine oil light comes on, it means that
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system may not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-16
for information on the Engine Oil Life System and
resetting the system.
When the change engine oil light appears, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the change
engine oil light comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-13.
Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) on
page 5-16. An Emission Control Service.
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. See footnote (l).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-61 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a
Month on page 6-10.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add
fluid as needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required
Services” in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
6-5
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
Inspect shields, vehicles with GVWR above 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only.
See footnote (g).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (m).
•
Additional Required Services
(Gasoline Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel Engine Supplement.
6-6
The following services should be performed at the
first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose
or damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (n).
•
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnotes † and (k).
•
•
•
6-7
Maintenance Footnotes
(Gasoline Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel Engine Supplement.
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage, and rear driveline center splines.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
6-8
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, hood
prop rod pivot, hood latch assembly, secondary
latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear
compartment hinges, latches, locks, fuel door hinge,
and any moving seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) Vehicles with Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
above 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only: Inspect shields for
damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable to
vehicles sold in the United States and recommended
for vehicles sold in Canada.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check
that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(m) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-21 for
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline
Engine) on page 6-13.
6-9
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000
Miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheel
nut torque. For proper torque, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-98.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-52 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on
page 5-13 for further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-21 for further details.
6-10
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-61.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-23.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-23.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
6-11
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-12
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants (Gasoline Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel Engine Supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
Engine Oil
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil (Gasoline
Engine) on page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-21.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
12377985, in Canada
Parking Brake U.S.
88901242) or lubricant meeting
Cable Guides
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering GM
No. U.S. 89021184, in Canada
System
89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Chassis
Lubrication
Front Wheel
Bearings
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
GC or GC-LB (GM Part No. U.S.
1051344, in Canada 993037).
6-13
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
Front and Rear 12378261, in Canada 10953455) or
Axle
equivalent meeting GM Specification
9986115.
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission
Fluid. Look for
Transfer Case
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
One-Piece
Propshaft Slip Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
Yoke Spline, (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Two-Piece
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
Propshaft
meeting requirements of GM
Slip-in-Tube
9985830.
Spline
6-14
Usage
Hood Hinges
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained by your GM dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
4300 V6
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 6000 V8
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Kit
Spark Plugs
4300 V6
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 6000 V8
Wiper Blades (ITTA Type)
22 inches (56.0 cm)
GM Part Number
15153904
ACDelco® Part Number
A1621C
25010792
88984215
52485513
PF47
PF46
CF104
89017883
12571164
41-932
41-985
15153642
—
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any
additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages.
You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-8
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders .........................................7-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-14
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-14
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting GMC, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filling out a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use the Text
Telephones (TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by
dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail GMC, refer to the addresses below.
United States
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.GMC.com
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583) (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782
(462-8782)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto
Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-5
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the GMC Roadside Assistance
program. This value-added service is intended to
provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city
or travel the open road. Call 1-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782) to speak with a GMC Road Assistance
representative 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to
the nearest service station.
7-6
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
• Trip Routing: Your Roadside Assistance
Representative can provide you with specific
information regarding this feature.
• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: Your
Roadside Assistance Representative can provide
you with specific information regarding this feature.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under GMC’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. GMC Roadside Assistance: 1-800-462-8782,
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
GMC reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in GMC’s judgement, the
claims become excessive in frequency or type of
occurrence.
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
7-7
Courtesy Transportation
Transportation Options
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-8
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available, up to a five-day
maximum. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but
it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
7-9
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. If your
vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,
and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
7-10
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by
using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.
7-11
When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
•
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
•
If an Accident Occurs
•
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
•
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
7-12
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6 for more information.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states with “no
fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you
will have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
7-13
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782),
or write:
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
7-14
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Or you can write to:
Owner’s Information
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-15
✍ NOTES
7-16
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-16
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-80
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-93
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-17
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-17
Airbag
Off Light ..................................................... 3-28
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-29
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-27
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) .... 7-10
Airbag System ................................................ 1-65
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-80
Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 1-71
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-70
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-74
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-79
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-70
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-70
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-68
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-67
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-43
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-11
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-45
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-77
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-34
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-89
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-86
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-90
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-87
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-84
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-85
Finish Care ................................................. 5-87
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-90
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-86
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-90
Tires .......................................................... 5-89
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-90
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-91
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-87
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-86
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-88
Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 3-17
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-43
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-45
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-75
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-77
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-76
Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-77
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-77
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-52
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-47
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-63
3-44
3-44
3-74
3-75
5-19
2-21
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-38
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-16
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-23
System Warning Light .................................. 3-33
Brakes .......................................................... 5-35
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-17
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-46
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-49
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-48
2
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamps .................................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Taillamps ....................................................
Buying New Tires ...........................................
5-46
5-47
5-50
5-49
5-63
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-98
Carbon Monoxide ........................... 2-26, 4-25, 4-37
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-86
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-75
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-77
Your CDs ................................................... 3-76
Cargo Door Relocking ....................................... 2-8
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-49
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ..... 1-24, 1-25
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-68
Charging System Light .................................... 3-32
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-36
Gages Warning Light ................................... 3-42
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-90
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..........
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position or the Second
Row Center Seat Position .........................
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .................. 1-56,
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Chime Level Adjustment ..................................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .......................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
1-38
1-35
1-44
1-32
1-54
1-51
1-60
1-42
3-77
3-17
5-89
5-87
5-85
5-87
5-84
5-86
5-89
5-90
5-87
5-86
5-88
Climate Control System ................................... 3-17
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-20
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-21
Rear Heating System ................................... 3-21
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-28
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-20
Cooling System .............................................. 5-26
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-40
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-8
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-13
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-14
3
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-41
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-15
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-15
Door
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door ........................... 2-11
Cargo Door Relocking .................................... 2-8
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
Rear Doors ................................................. 2-12
Sliding Side Door ........................................ 2-10
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-15
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-17
City ........................................................... 4-20
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-23
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-18
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-30
Winter ........................................................ 4-25
Dual Tire Operation ......................................... 5-60
4
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................
Floor Console Fuse Block .............................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Change Engine Oil Light ...............................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Fan Noise ..................................................
Fuel Regulator ............................................
Oil .............................................................
Oil Life System ...........................................
Overheating ................................................
Reduced Power Light ...................................
Speed Limiter .............................................
Starting ......................................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................
5-93
5-95
5-94
5-93
5-93
5-93
5-17
5-38
3-39
3-36
5-21
2-20
3-35
5-12
2-26
5-32
2-20
5-13
5-16
5-24
3-41
3-25
2-19
3-15
7-10
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-15
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-31
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-17
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-90
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-77
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-69
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-70
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-82
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-19
Power Steering ........................................... 5-32
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-44
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-42
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Regulator ................................................... 2-20
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................
Floor Console Fuse Block .............................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Windshield Wiper .........................................
5-95
5-94
5-93
5-93
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light .......................... 3-42
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-35
Fuel .......................................................... 3-42
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-38
Speedometer .............................................. 3-25
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-32
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-5
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-93
Headlamps .................................................... 5-47
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-46
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
5
Headlamps (cont.)
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-48
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-46
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Heater ........................................................... 3-17
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-41
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-23
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-35
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-59
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-14
Cluster ....................................................... 3-24
6
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-39
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Dome ........................................................
Dome Lamp Override ...................................
Exterior ......................................................
Reading .....................................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Light
Airbag Off ..................................................
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
Change Engine Oil ......................................
Charging System .........................................
Check Gages Warning .................................
Cruise Control .............................................
5-53
3-16
3-15
3-15
3-13
3-15
1-44
3-28
3-27
3-34
3-33
3-39
3-32
3-42
3-40
Light (cont.)
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-41
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-41
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-36
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-29
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .................... 3-26
Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-41
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-26
Security ..................................................... 3-40
StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 3-35
StabiliTrak® Not Ready ................................. 3-34
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-42
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-15
Exit ........................................................... 3-15
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-30
Locking Rear Axle ............................................ 4-8
Lockout Protection ............................................ 2-9
Locks
Cargo Door Relocking .................................... 2-8
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Lockout Protection ......................................... 2-9
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-16
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-10
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-11
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000km) ....................... 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-8
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-15
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-36
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-15
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-28
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ........................ 2-28
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-30
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-30
Outside Manual Mirror .................................. 2-28
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-29
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
7
N
P
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-17
Noise Control System, Tampering ...................... 5-45
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-15
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-23
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-25
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-23
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-25
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-29
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-74
Passing ......................................................... 4-14
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-17
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-16
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-41
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-18
Seat ............................................................ 1-4
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-32
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-31
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-25
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-25
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-14
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-39
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-38
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-16
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-20
Outside
Camper-Type Mirrors .................................... 2-28
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-30
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-30
Manual Mirror ............................................. 2-28
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-29
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
8
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-14
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-24
Radios .......................................................... 3-43
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-45
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-75
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-77
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-76
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-52
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-47
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-63
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-44
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-44
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-74
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-75
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-15
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ......... 3-21
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-44
Locking ........................................................ 4-8
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-8
Rear Doors .................................................... 2-12
Rear Heating System ...................................... 3-21
Rear Outside Passenger Positions, Safety Belts ..... 1-25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-28
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-28
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-35
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-41
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-71
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-50
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-14
United States Government ............................ 7-13
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-81
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-81
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-18
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-23
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-30
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-27
9
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ............................ 3-26
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-31
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-26
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-86
Center Passenger Position .................... 1-24, 1-25
Driver Position ............................................ 1-15
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-15
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-14
Rear Outside Passenger Positions ................. 1-25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................... 1-28
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-23
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-23
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-22
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Manual ........................................................ 1-3
Power Seat .................................................. 1-4
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-79
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Seat Position .................................... 1-54
Rear Outside Seat Position or the Second
Row Center Seat Position ......................... 1-51
10
Securing a Child Restraint (cont.)
Right Front Seat Position ...................... 1-56, 1-60
Security Light ................................................. 3-40
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-5
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-36
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-14
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-79
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ......... 3-44
Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ..... 3-44
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-90
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-23
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-22
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Sliding Side Door ............................................ 2-10
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-83
Installing .................................................... 5-74
Removing ................................................... 5-71
Storing ....................................................... 5-82
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-98
Speedometer .................................................. 3-25
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-9
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ................................ 3-35
StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light ............................. 3-34
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-19
Steering ........................................................ 4-12
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas ................................................ 2-30
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-29
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-16
Swing-Out Side Door, 60/40 ............................. 2-11
Swing-Out Windows ........................................ 2-16
T
Taillamps ....................................................... 5-49
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-74
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17
Passlock® ................................................... 2-17
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tires ............................................................. 5-52
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-89
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-63
Chains ....................................................... 5-68
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-70
Cleaning .................................................... 5-89
Different Size .............................................. 5-65
Dual Tire Operation ..................................... 5-60
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-69
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-59
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-61
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-74
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-71
Tires (cont.)
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-79
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-83
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-82
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-67
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-67
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-63
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-42
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-35
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-37
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-35
Traction
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-9
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-21
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-25
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-75
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-65
11
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-30
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ........................................... 7-10
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-92
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-92
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-20
Visors ........................................................... 2-16
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-32
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-23
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-5
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
12
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-67
Different Size .............................................. 5-65
Replacement ............................................... 5-67
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-42
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Manual ...................................................... 2-15
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Swing-Out Windows ..................................... 2-16
Windshield
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-88
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-34
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-51
Fuses ........................................................ 5-93
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-25
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement